288
2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Your Vehicle at a Glance ..................................................................................................................... 4 Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7 Seat belts, SRS, and child protection Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51 Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column Features ..............................................................................................................................................99 Climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLink Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 151 Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 165 Engine and transmission operation Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 189 Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 235 Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 259 Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 273 Warranty and contact information Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 277 How to order Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary Fluid capacities and tire pressures Owner's Identification Form

2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    10

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................4Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7 Seat belts, SRS, and child protectionInstruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 51Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering columnFeatures ..............................................................................................................................................99Climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLinkBefore Driving.................................................................................................................................. 151Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loadingDriving .............................................................................................................................................. 165Engine and transmission operationMaintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 189Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 235Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fusesTechnical Information..................................................................................................................... 259Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controlsWarranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 273Warranty and contact informationAuthorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 277How to orderIndex...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary Fluid capacities and tire pressures

Owner's Identification Form

Page 2: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe TSX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33SEAC10 .

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Acura TSX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’sstaff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura.Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased toanswer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

DOOR LOCK SWITCH

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

DIGITAL CLOCK

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.141)

(P.112)

(P.100)

(P.88)

(P.89)

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASETRUNK RELEASE HANDLE (P.80)

(P.154) (P.155)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION(P.168)

(P.170)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER(P.93)

(P.75)

Page 6: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

MOONROOFSWITCH

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HORN

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM OFF SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS(P. 65)

HAZARDWARNING BUTTON(P. 69)

(P. 69)

CRUISE CONTROLS(P. 143)

(P. 70)(P. 181)

(P. 92)

(P. 139)

(P. 66)

(P. 68)

Page 7: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

6

Page 8: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 21Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 27..How the SRS Indicator Works . 27

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 28

.............................Airbag Service . 28...Additional Safety Precautions . 29

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 30

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 30

All Children Should Sit in the.................................Back Seat . 31

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 31

..........................................Infants . 31.............................Small Children . 31

..........................Larger Children . 31If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 33If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 33...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

Protecting Infants and.........................Small Children . 35.......................Protecting Infants . 35

.........Protecting Small Children . 36.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 37....................Installing a Child Seat . 38

Installing a Child Seat with.....................................LATCH . 39

...........Protecting Larger Children . 44When Can a Larger Child Sit

....................................in Front . 46...Additional Safety Precautions . 47

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 48...................................Safety Labels . 49

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

Page 9: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

16

30 47

191

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

8

Page 10: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)(8)

(9)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners: if equipped

Page 11: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 12: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

24

2627

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Page 13: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

12

Page 14: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doormonitor indicator works.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.

30 47

7456

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Page 15: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page

). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

7083

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 16: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

83

84

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 17: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 18: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

20

CONTINUED

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

RELEASE BUTTONS

Page 19: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 20: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag (ifequipped) inflates, a cup holder orother hard object attached on ornear the door could be propelledinside the vehicle and hurtsomeone.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

Page 21: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you to fasten your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your belt, thebeeper will sound and the indicatorwill flash.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

If you do not fasten your seat beltbefore the beeper stops, theindicator will stop flashing butremain on.

16

41

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

20

Page 22: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront-airbag inflation.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or workingproperly will not provide goodprotection and should be replaced assoon as possible.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case,the airbags would not be needed, butthe additional restraint could behelpful.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

Acura Warranty Information

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt MaintenanceAutomatic Seat Belt Tensioners

U.S. Models

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

Page 23: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .223

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 24: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in ON (II).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,or side impact in models with sideairbags.

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automaticallyturn the airbag off (see page

).27

21

28

26

25

27

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

Page 25: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the airbag helps protect yourhead and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

24

Page 26: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

It the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will deploy at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

latched

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

Page 27: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the Side Airbag Off Indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

28How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

26

Page 28: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells you thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

rivingand

Passenger

Safety

27

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Page 29: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized your dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

55

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

Airbag Service

notAn airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 30: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Page 31: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

35 4344 47

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

30

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Page 32: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

44

CONTINUED

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

Page 33: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

32

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

Page 34: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

16

16

13

44

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Page 35: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

76

81

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

34

Page 36: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Page 37: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild uses the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

36

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 38: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) system.

1.

2.

39

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 39: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

38

Page 40: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outerrear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Rigid typeLOWER ANCHOR MARKS

Page 41: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connection asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

84

Installing a Child Seat

40

TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

Page 42: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Page 43: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

42

Page 44: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.Lift the anchor cover, then attach

the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

41 41

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

COVER

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

Outer CenterTETHER ANCHORAGE POINT TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 45: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

44

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Page 46: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

4.

5.

3.

37

Protecting Larger Children

Using a Booster Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Page 47: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

44

Protecting Larger Children

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

46

Page 48: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

Page 49: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

48

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 50: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully. Ifa label comes off or becomes hard toread, contact your dealer for areplacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

On models with sidecurtain airbags

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

HOOD

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

Page 51: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

U.S. models

Canadian models

On cars with side curtain airbags

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

50

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

Page 52: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 52............................Instrument Panel . 53

................Instrument Panel Lights . 54.............................................Gauges . 60

.....................................Odometer . 60

...Outside Temperature Display . 60...................................Trip Meter . 61

...................Temperature Gauge . 61..................................Fuel Gauge . 62

..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 62Maintenance Required

...................................Indicator . 62Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 64..................Wipers and Washers . 65

.......Turn Signal and Headlights . 66Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 67............Daytime Running Lights . 68

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 68..........................Hazard Warning . 69

.............Rear Window Defogger . 69......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 70

...............................Keys and Locks . 71..............................................Keys . 71

....................Immobilizer System . 72............................Ignition Switch . 73

..................................Door Locks . 74..............Childproof Door Locks . 76

...................Remote Transmitter . 76...........................................Trunk . 80

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 81.....................Trunk Main Switch . 81

....................................Seat Heaters . 82...................................................Seat . 83

.............Power Seat Adjustment . 83...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 83

..........................Head Restraints . 84.......................Folding Rear Seat . 85

.............................................Mirrors . 87....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 88

................Power Mirror Heaters . 88..............................Power Windows . 89

Power Window Control...............................Operations . 91

.........................................Moonroof . 92.................................Parking Brake . 93

..........................................Sun Visor . 94..................................Vanity Mirror . 94.................................Interior Lights . 95

...........Interior Convenience Items . 96.......................Beverage Holders . 97

..........Accessory Power Sockets . 97...............Console Compartment . 97

......................Sunglasses Holder . 98....................................Glove Box . 98

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

51

Page 53: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Control Locations

52

MIRROR CONTROLS

DOOR LOCK SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

(P.141)DIGITAL CLOCK

(P.88)

(P.89)

INDICATORSGAUGES

(P.53)(P.60)

(P.112)

(P.100)

(P.155)

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLEFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE

(P.80)(P.154)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P.170)MANUALTRANSMISSION(P.168)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER (P.93)

(P.75)

Page 54: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

53

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATORDOOR AND TRUNK OPEN MONITOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERLIGHTCHARGING SYSTEM

INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

(P.56)

(P.59)

(P.59)

(P.54)

(P.59)

(P.57)

(P.58)

(P.56)

(P.56)

(P.57)

(P.55)

(P.54)

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR(P.55)(P.55)

(P.54)(P.54)

(P.62)

(P.54)

(P.58)

Page 55: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator has two functions:This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. A beeper sounds if you tryto drive with the parking brake notfully released. Driving with theparking brake not fully releasedcan damage the brakes and tires.

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

1.

2.

247

248

248

250

Instrument Panel Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake and BrakeSystem Indicator

54

U.S. Canada

Page 56: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, orside curtain airbags. For moreinformation, see page .

28

27179

Instrument Panel Lights

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) IndicatorSide Airbag Off

Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

U.S. Canada

Page 57: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Have your vehiclechecked by your Acura dealer.Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal driving ability, but will nothave VSA traction and stabilityenhancement. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

3.

181

181

181

Instrument Panel Lights

Door and Trunk Open MonitorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

56

Page 58: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blink,or if they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning button, both turn signalindicators blink. All turn signals onthe outside of the vehicle shouldflash.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

217 219

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Instrument Panel LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Page 59: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Canadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

142

66

68

Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Instrument Panel Lights

58

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 60: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the master button (see page

).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.143143

72

206

Canadian models only

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Control MainIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Instrument Panel LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

Page 61: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

± ±

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

This display shows the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

Gauges

Odometer Outside Temperature Display

60

SPEEDOMETER

U.S. model is shown.

SELECT/RESET KNOB MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TACHOMETER ODOMETER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TRIP METER

FUEL GAUGE

Page 62: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- - - -- - - -

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.When you turn the ignition switch to

ON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequences appear, 1 second at atime: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

245

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

Page 63: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in for thevehicle’s scheduled maintenanceunder normal driving conditions. Theindicator does not reflect severemaintenance intervals.

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears as text in the odometer/outside temperature display afteryou start the engine. Turn theengine off and confirm the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap, thenretighten it at least 3 clicks. Whenyou restart the engine, the message

appears again. To clear, press andhold the Trip/Reset button until themessage is replaced by theodometer/outside temperaturedisplay.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off and check orretighten the fuel cap at least 3 clicks.The MIL goes out after 3 days ofnormal driving once the cap istightened or replaced. If it does notgo out, have your dealer inspect thevehicle. For more information, seepage .

Refer to the maintenance schedulefor normal and severe drivingconditions on pages and .

248

193 195

Fuel Gauge Maintenance Required Indicator

Check Fuel Cap Indicator(odometer/outside temperaturemessage)

Gauges

62

MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 64: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select/Resetknob in the instrument panel, thenturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Hold the knob for about 10seconds until the indicator resets.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourdealer, reset the indicator as follows.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on for2 seconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), thisindicator will light for 2 secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash for10 seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

1.

2.

3.

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

SELECT/RESET KNOB

Page 65: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

64

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

MOONROOF SWITCH

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

TILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS(P. 65)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P. 69)

(P. 69)

CRUISE CONTROLS(P. 143)

(P. 70)(P. 181)

(P. 92)

(P. 139)

(P. 66) (P. 68)

Page 66: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operation whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wiper

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Wipers and WashersInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

Page 67: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

Turn SignalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlight onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the positionturns on the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Headlights

Turn Signal, Headlights

66

Page 68: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

To turn on the highbeams, push the lever forward untilyou hear a click. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).To turn off the high beams, pull thelever back. To flash the high beams,pull the lever farther back, and thenrelease it. The high beams remain onuntil the lever is released.

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, and licenseplate light within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

58

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams

Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off FeatureInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

Page 69: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionswitch off, even if you set theparking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Adjust the brightness to the desiredlevel with the headlight switch off,and also with the headlight switch on.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the Select/Reset knob fully to the right willreturn the instrument panel to thebrightness adjusted with theheadlight switch off and a tone willsound.

There are six brightness levels.When you turn the knob, theodometer/trip meter displaychanges to circles that show you thecurrent level. You will hear a tonewhen you reach the maximum orminimum brightness.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

68

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

Page 70: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button comes on to showthe defogger is on. It also shuts offwhen you turn off the ignition switch.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning, Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

With navigationWithout navigation

Page 71: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andthe indicator lights.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

70

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 72: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Your vehicle also comes with tworemote transmitters; see page

for an explanation of theoperation.76

Remote Transmitter

Keys and LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

Page 73: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

72

Page 74: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly. If the front wheelsare turned, the anti-theft lock maymake it difficult to turn the key.Firmly turn the steering wheel to theleft or to the right as you turn thekey.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III)

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

CONTINUED

LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

Page 75: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, pull and holdthe outside door handle then pushthe lock tab down. Release thehandle, then close the door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down, and close the door.

Door Locks

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

74

LOCK TAB

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 76: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors.

You can open or close the windowsby using the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. On the driver’sdoor, push the top of the masterdoor lock switch to lock all doors,;push the bottom to unlock them.

On the front passenger’s door, pushthe master door lock switch down tolock the all doors, and up to unlockthem.

91

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

bottom

top

Page 77: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You can open and close all powerwindows from outside the vehiclewith the key. With the remotetransmitter, you can open thewindows. Refer to Power Windowson page .

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior andinterior lights will flash. You cannotlock it if any door is not fully closedor key is in the ignition switch.

When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset.

91

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

Childproof Door Locks

LOCK

Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter

76

PANICBUTTON

LEVER

LED

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

Page 78: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if any door is notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system will also set.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for about 1 second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if the keyis in the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter CarePANIC

TRUNK

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Page 79: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

To replace the battery:

Battery type: CR2025

Place a cloth on the edge of thetransmitter, and remove the upperhalf by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the transmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter

78

BATTERY

Page 80: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

Page 81: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Give the person the valet key.

You can open the trunk in any ofthree ways:

Pull up on the trunk release leverlocated to the left of the driver’sseat.Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.If the doors are unlocked, pressthe trunk release button on thetrunk lid.

Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key. Also make surethe rear seat is not folded down(see page ).

1.

2.

163

48

85Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

TrunkInstrum

entsand

Controls

80

Pull

MASTER KEYTRUNK RELEASE LEVERTRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

Page 82: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release leverby turning off the trunk main switchin the glove box, locking the glovebox, and make sure the rear seat isnot folded down.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

Emergency Trunk Opener Trunk Main Switch

TrunkInstrum

entsand

Controls

81

Page 83: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag system, there isno heater in the passenger’s seat-back. The ignition switch must beON (II) to use the heaters.

Seat Heaters

82

Page 84: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

The passenger’s seat also has poweradjustable controls.

Raises or lowers theseat.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

Driver’s seat only:

Driver’s seat only:

13 14Power Seat Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

83

Page 85: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The front and rear head restraintsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonand push the restraint down.

Seats

Head Restraints

84

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 86: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf.Turn the key clockwise, pull downthe top of the seat-back, then releasethe key.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

CONTINUED

Seats

Folding Rear Seat

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

MASTER KEY

GUIDE

Page 87: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .48

162

Seats

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

86

Page 88: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the AUTO buttonon the bottom of the mirror. Theindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the OFF button to turnoff this feature.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

INDICATOR

Page 89: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

1.

3.

2.

4.

Mirrors

Power Mirror HeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors

88

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Page 90: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Close the window bypulling the switch up and holding it.

To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 91: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The passenger windows cannot beraised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

90

Page 92: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

1.

2.

3.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Power Window ControlOperationsOpening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

Page 93: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper button( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the lower button( ). Release the button whenthe moonroof gets to the desiredposition. Make sure everyone’shands are away from the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

92

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

Page 94: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to operate themoonroof.

54

Parking Brake

Moonroof, Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

PARKING BRAKE LEVERIf you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is put into gear with theparking brake on.

Page 95: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The lights come on when you pull upthe cover.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

94

Page 96: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ceiling lights have a three ortwo-position switch; ON (for three-position), Door Activated, and OFF.In the Door Activated (center or left)position, the lights come on whenyou:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the spotlightlenses to turn them on and off.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

Ceiling Light

Individual Interior Lights

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

COURTESY LIGHT

Page 97: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Interior Convenience Items

96

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET/BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

TRUNK

CENTER POCKET

CENTER ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDERS

UTILITY POCKET/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

Page 98: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The tray in the console compartmenthas a coin holder.

Beverage Holders

Accessory Power Sockets

Console Compartment

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Page 99: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Sunglasses Holder Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

98

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 100: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Acura has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour Acura.

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your Acura provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 100..........Dual Temperature Control . 109

..............Climate Control Sensors . 111..........................Playing the Radio . 112

.....................To Play the Radio . 114....................To Select a Station . 114

.................Adjusting the Sound . 117....................Radio Frequencies . 118

........................Radio Reception . 118..................................Playing a CD . 120

..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 122.............................To Play a CD . 122

...............To Stop Playing a CD . 125Removing CDs from the

.................................Changer . 125.....CD Changer Error Messages . 126

.....................Protecting your CDs . 127.................General Information . 127

..........................Protecting CDs . 127...............................Playing a Tape . 128

..........................To Play a Tape . 130............To Stop Playing a Tape . 130............Tape Search Functions . 131

.....Caring the Tape and Player . 132

Playing the XM Satellite......................................Radio . 133

...............Satellite Digital Radio . 133...To Play XM Satellite Radio . 134

..................To Select a Channel . 134..............Satellite Radio Signals . 136

Receiving Satellite Radio....................................Service . 137

.............Steering Wheel Controls . 139.................Radio Theft Protection . 140

..........................Setting the Clock . 141............................Security System . 142

...............................Cruise Control . 143HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 146

FeaturesF

eatures

99

TM

TM

Page 101: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Vents, Heating, and A/C

100

Without Navigation System

FAN CONTROL BAR

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

MODE BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(DRIVER’S SIDE)

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

A/C BUTTON

Page 102: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

101

AUTO BUTTON

MODE ICONS

A/C BUTTON

FAN CONTROL ICONS

DUAL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

With Navigation System

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(DRIVER’S SIDE)

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING ICONSTEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Page 103: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲ ▼

See pages for AutomaticClimate Control and ManualOperations information.

Without the navigation system, youcan manually select the fan speed bypressing the fan control buttons. Thefan speed is represented by verticalbars in the display.

With the navigation system, you canmanually select the fan speed bypressing the A/C button next to thedisplay and then, pressing the fancontrol icons.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings byselecting the DUAL button.

Press the DUAL button. Theindicator will come on. The driverand passenger can each select thetemperature control bars ( orside) to the desired setting.

When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thesame temperature.

107 108

Temperature Control

What Each Control Does

Fan Control

Vents, Heating, and A/C

102

Page 104: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

On vehicles without the navigationsystem, press the A/C button to turnon the A/C. You will see A/C ON orA/C OFF in the display.

On vehicles with the navigationsystem, press the A/C button to viewthe display. Touching ‘‘ON’’ or‘‘OFF’’ in the display turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control buttons belowthe outside temperature.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).69

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

103

Page 105: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Airflows from the center andcorner vents in the dashboard.

Airflows from the floor vents.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In these modes, the A/C stayson with the indicator off.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.

1.

2.3.4.For Vehicles without Navigation System

For Vehicles with Navigation System

Mode Control Ventilation

Vents, Heating, and A/C

104

Page 106: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲▼

▲ ▼

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Press the A/C button, the ManualOperation A/C screen will appear.Select the ON icon on the display.Select the desired temperatureand MODE selections. If theoutside air is humid, select theRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to theFresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control bars (or side).

Press the A/C button, the manualoperation of A/C screen willappear.Select the desired mode and fanspeed icons on the display.Adjust for warmth with thetemperature control bars ( orside).

Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button.Make sure the temperaturecontrol is set to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.3.

61

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

If the interior is very warm,

Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

Without navigation system

With Navigation SystemUsing the Heater Using the A/C

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

105

Page 107: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to Fresh Air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/Cindicator will not come on in U.S.vehicles.Set the temperature control dial orbuttons so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the side vents.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator will not comeon in U.S. vehicles.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature control toyour preference.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.3.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Vents, Heating, and A/C

106

Page 108: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲▼

▲▼

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air to raise or lower theinterior temperature to thetemperature you selected.

If you set the temperature to itslowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,(Hi) the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Whenthe indicator in the Dual button is on,the driver’s side and passenger’s sidetemperature can be controlledindependently (see page ).

Press the AUTO button.The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Set thedesired temperature by pressingthe temperature control bars (or side). You will see AUTO inthe system’s display.

Set thedesired temperature by pressingthe temperature control bars (or side). The selectedtemperature will show in the upperdisplay.

109

Dual Temperature Control

Without Navigation System:

With Navigation System:

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Automatic Climate Control

Features

107

Page 109: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you press OFF, the ClimateControl system shuts off completely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When the Climate Control System isturned OFF, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the automatic climatecontrol system when it is in AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to turnoff.

With Navigation SystemWithout Navigation System

With Navigation System

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off

108

Page 110: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol bars, one for the driver, andone for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the green indicator in theDUAL button is lit.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the upperdisplay. For vehicles with navigationsystem when the indicator in theDUAL button is off, you can adjustboth sides to the same temperatureby adjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control bar ( orside).

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Bars

Features

109

DUAL BUTTON

Without Navigation System

DUAL BUTTON

With Navigation System

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(DRIVER’S SIDE)

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(DRIVER’S SIDE)

TEMPERATURECONTROL BAR(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

Page 111: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as or .

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then press the temperature controlbars ( or side) on the driver’sside. To set the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s,press the temperature control bars( or side) on the passenger’sside. You can adjust the passenger’sside without pressing the DUALbutton first.

Dual Temperature Control

110

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

Page 112: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Climate Control SensorsF

eatures

111

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Page 113: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing the Radio

112

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

STEREO INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

A. SEL BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

Without Navigation System

SEEK/SKIP BAR

A. SEL INDICATOR

Page 114: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing the RadioF

eatures

113

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

PRESET ICONS

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

AUTO SELECT ICON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN ICON

With Navigation System

SEEK/SKIP BAR

Page 115: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe PWR/VOL knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars oricons.

Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, and turn the knobto the left to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button, ortouch the SCAN icon (models withnavigation system), then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button or touch theSCAN icon again.

XM Satellite Radio information isavailable on page .

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

133

For Vehicles with Navigation System

On U.S. models

Playing the Radio

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SCAN

SEEK

114

Page 116: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- - The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the preset icons.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Each preset button or iconcan store one frequency on AM, andtwo frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton or icon.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe button or icon and hold it untilyou hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

For Vehicles with Navigation System

CONTINUED

Playing the Radio

Preset

Features

115

Page 117: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button or touch theAuto Select icon. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It stores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbuttons (1 6) or icons. You willsee a ‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing apreset button or icon if Auto Selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset button or icon.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons or icons. Use the TUNE,SEEK, or SCAN function to findstations, then store them in thepreset buttons or icons as describedpreviously.

press the A.SEL button or icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

To turn off Auto Select,

AUTO SELECT

Playing the Radio

116

Page 118: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobor touch the icon to adjust thesetting to your liking. When the levelreaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’in the display.

Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting.

Touch the left or right bars on thesound grid. Balance is equalizedwhen the vertical lines are centeredon the grid.

Touch the front or rear bars on thesound grid. The fader is equalizedwhen the horizontal lines arecentered on the grid.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. On vehicleswith navigation system, touch theRETURN icon to go back to theaudio screen.

Press the SOUND button or icon, orpress the TUNE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theSOUND icon or press the TUNEknob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

For Vehicles without Navigation System

For Vehicles with Navigation System(U.S. vehicles only)

On Vehicles with Navigation System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Playing the RadioF

eatures

117

Page 119: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Playing the Radio

118

Page 120: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Playing the RadioF

eatures

119

Page 121: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing a CD

120

CD LOAD INDICATOR

EJECT BUTTONLOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

CD BUTTON

Without Navigation System

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

Page 122: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing a CDF

eatures

121

CD SLOT

With Navigation System UPPER DISPLAY

CH DISC ICONS

EJECT BUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOAD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

RANDOM ICON

CH DISC BAR

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON

TRACK REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT ICON

Page 123: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II) position.

You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX XMbutton.

To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player. The cassette player isoptional on all U.S. models.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

For vehicles with Satellite RadioTo Play a CD

Playing a CD, CD Changer

122

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

Page 124: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

▲▼

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the disc numberindicator is not highlighted) andpress the appropriate preset bar ortouch a disc icon. The current CDstops playing and starts the loadingsequence. The CD just loaded willplay.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display. Onvehicles with navigation system,these numbers also appear in theupper display.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay.The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redlight starts blinking.Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, thesystem begins playing the last CDloaded.

To select a different disc, press anappropriate preset button (1 6) oruse the Preset 5 (DISC ) to selectthe previous disc or Preset 6 (DISC

) to select the next disc insequence. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Playing a CD, CD ChangerF

eatures

123

Page 125: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

For Vehicles without Navigation System For Vehicles with Navigation SystemPush the to

play the next track on the disc. Pushthe once to replay the track inplay, press twice to replay theprevious track.To remove rapidly within a track,press and hold the , or the

button.

Press to continuouslyreplay a track. You will see RPT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

Press to play thetracks in random order. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded. To activate it, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display, and you willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the selected CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of thesystem.

To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button, the controlicons will appear on the screen.

Press the icon orSCAN button, to get a 10 secondsampling of each track on thecurrent CD. Press the icon or buttonagain to turn it off.

Touch to get a 10second sampling of the first song ofeach disc in the CD changer. Touchthe icon again to turn it off.

Touch tocontinuously play the same song onthe CD. Press the icon again to stopthe function.

SEEK/SKIP

REPEAT

RANDOM

SCAN TRACK SCAN

DISC SCAN

TRACK RPT

Playing a CD, CD Changer

124

Page 126: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Touch the icon tocontinuously replay the current CD.Touch again to turn it off.

Touch the icon toplay the current CD in random order.Touch again to stop.

Selects an icon andplays the disc.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the AUX button to switch tothe tape while a CD is playing. Pressthe CD button again to switch backto the CD player.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, the CD will stay in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the CD will begin playingwhere it left off.

To remove the disc currently playing,press the EJECT button. When adisc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar or icon. Whenthat CD begins playing, press theeject button. Continue pressing theEJECT button to remove all the discsfrom the changer.

Press the AM/FM or CD/AUXbutton, or CD/AUX XM button toswitch to the radio or satellite radiowhile a CD is playing. Press the CDbutton again to play the CD.

DISC RPT

TRACK RDM

CH DISC

To Stop Playing a CD

Removing CDs from the Changer

Playing a CD, CD ChangerF

eatures

125

Page 127: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Error Message SolutionCauseIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.Insert CDs.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDChangerHigh Temperature

CD Changer Error Messages

126

Page 128: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDsF

eatures

127

Page 129: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing a Tape (Optional)

128

PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

Without Navigation System

SEEK/SKIP BAR

CD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT INDICATOR

REPEAT BUTTON

Page 130: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Playing a Tape (Optional)F

eatures

129

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

CH DISC BAR

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTONAM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

NR ICON

PLAY/PROG ICON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

With Navigation SystemREPEAT INDICATOR

REPEAT ICON

Page 131: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thePreset 4 (NR) side of the preset baror touching the NR icon. Dolbyremains off until you press thepreset bar or the icon again.

Dolby noise reductionmanufactured under license fromDolby laboratories licensingCorporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof the Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/AUX XM button. To change back tothe tape player, push the CD/AUXbutton or CD/AUX XM button.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button on the cassette player.If you want to turn the player off,press the PWR/VOL knob or turnoff the ignition. The tape will remainin the drive.When you turn the system back on,the tape player will be in pause mode.Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) ortouch the PROG icon on vehicleswith navigation system to resumeplay.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of the tape isplaying. The indicates the sideyou inserted upward in now playing.If you want to play the other side,press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or press theAUDIO DISPLAY button and touchthe PROG icon. When the playerreaches the end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape

Playing a Tape (Optional)

130

Page 132: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-▲

Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonor icon to continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button or icon again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

To rewind the tape,push the Preset 1 (REW). You willsee REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF). You will see FF displayed.Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

To rewind the tapepush the upper side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. To fast forward the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. Press either side of thePROG icon in the audio display totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display, press thetape eject button to remove the tapefrom the unit. Make sure the tape isnot damaged. If the tape will noteject or the error message stays onafter the tape ejects, take yourvehicle to your dealer.

Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

Tape Search Functions SKIP

REPEAT

FF/REW

FF/REW

Playing a Tape (Optional)F

eatures

131

NOTE:

Page 133: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Caring for the Tape and Player

Playing a Tape (Optional)

132

Page 134: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii, Alaska,and Canada.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Satellite radio is available in U.S.models only.

U.S. Models onlySatellite Digital Radio

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

133

SCANBUTTON

without Navigation System with Navigation System

PWR/VOLKNOB

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP/BAR

PRESET ICONS

UPPER DISPLAY

SEEK/SKIP BAR

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODEINDICATOR

SRT RADIOBUTTON

MODEICON

SRT RADIO BUTTON

CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODEINDICATOR

SCANICON

PWR/VOLKNOB

TM

TM

Page 135: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--The ignition must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on:

Press and release this button tochange the display. The display willchange in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX XMbutton.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, orAUDIO button.

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of three methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), and SCAN.

Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.

Vehicles with Navigation System

Vehicles without Navigation System

Vehicles with Navigation System

To Play XM Satellite Radio TUNEDISP

To Select a Channel

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

134

TM

TM

Page 136: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of thesequence.

Each preset icon or buttoncan store one channel in XM1 andone in XM2.

Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired channel.Pick a preset icon or button andhold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on XM1 and XM2.

Once your XM channels are preset,pressing the CH DISC button willselect your preset channels.

Push the CD/AUX XM button.(You will see XM1 or XM2.)

TheSEEK/SKIP function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, turn the TUNE knobclockwise. 1.

2.

3.

4.

For Vehicles with Navigation System

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

SCAN

Preset

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

Features

135

TM

Page 137: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Satellite Radio Signals

136

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

TM

Page 138: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on an east/west road witha mountain on the south side ofthe road.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving in the tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the CD/AUX XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

CONTINUED

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

137

TM

Page 139: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the displayand you will be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.

Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the display.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSAT Radio mode while you awaitactivation. This should take about 30minutes.

www.xmradio.com

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

To get your XM Satellite radio IDnumber:

138

TM

Page 140: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

▲ ▼

+-

-+

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

Steering Wheel ControlsF

eatures

139

CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

Page 141: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your Owner’s Manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knob tostore it.

If your vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a dealer canaccess your code with the your radio’sserial number. To access the serialnumber, turn the radio on. It mustdisplay ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radiooff. Push the preset 1, preset 6, andpower buttons at the same time, thenquickly release.

If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit is displayed.Press and release the TUNE knob tostore it. Enter the remaining three

digits the same way.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbuttons (1 6) after the systembegins working. Your originalsettings were lost when power wasdisconnected.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code usingthe preset bars or the TUNE knob.Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five-digit, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Radio Theft Protection

140

Page 142: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

On models without Navigation System

On models with Navigation System

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Refer to the Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to set up the time.

Press and hold the TUNE/SOUNDknob. Change the hours by pressingthe until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink. Presson the H (Preset 4) until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing theM (Preset 5) until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Whenyou are finished, press the TUNE/SOUND knob again to set the time. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. Pressing and holdingthe TUNE/SOUND knob, thenpressing the R (Preset 6) sets theclock back to the previous hour. Ifthe displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

Setting the ClockF

eatures

141

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

H BUTTON R BUTTON

DIGITAL CLOCK

M BUTTON

Page 143: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page ), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemlight on the instrument panel startsblinking immediately to show youthe system is setting itself.

56

Security System

142

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 144: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

143

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 145: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will come back on.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

144

Page 146: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle will accelerateto the same cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterButton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the cruise control masterbutton.

Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

145

Page 147: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink Universal Transceiver tooperate it. They do not have a safetyfeature that causes the motor to stopand reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls .

Important Safety Precautions

General Information

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

146

TM

Page 148: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinkTransceiver for about 20 seconds, oruntil the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then go to step1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

2.

3.

1.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

147

Page 149: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink button you just trained.If the red indicator blinks for 2seconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System’’.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it.

When the red indicator flashesrapidly, release both buttons.HomeLink should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

The red indicator in HomeLinkshould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Canadian Owners:

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

148

The remote controlyou are training f rom may stoptransmitting af ter 2 seconds. This is notenough f or HomeLink to learn the code.Release and press the button on theremote control every 2 seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

Page 150: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson, then release it. The indicatormay blink, or come on and stay on.You then have approximately 30seconds to complete the followingsteps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

149

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 151: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem, or would like information onhome products that can be operatedby HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515.On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’

Customer Assistance

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

150

Page 152: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 152.................Fuel Recommendation . 152

.........Service Station Procedures . 154....................................Refueling . 154

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 155

...................................Oil Check . 157.............Engine Coolant Check . 158

...............................Fuel Economy . 159........Improving Fuel Economy . 159

...Accessories and Modifications . 160................................Accessories . 160

...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 161.Additional Safety Precautions . 161

.............................Carrying Cargo . 162................................Load Limits . 163

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk.................or on a Roof Rack . 164

Carrying Items in the.....Passenger Compartment . 164

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

151

Page 153: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause a persistent, heavy metallicrapping noise that can lead to enginedamage.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

On vehicles with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

152

Page 154: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to yourQuick Start Guide.

Fuel RecommendationB

eforeD

riving

153

Page 155: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

3.

4.

1.

2.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station Procedure

154

FUEL FILL CAP

Push

TETHERATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 156: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To Open the Hood:Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp may come on (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1.2.

5.

6.

248

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Hood

Service Station ProcedureB

eforeD

riving

155

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

Page 157: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To Close the Hood:

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood near thecenter.

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.

3.

Service Station Procedure

156

SUPPORT ROD

Page 158: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

1.

2.

3.

4.

202

Oil Check

Adding Oil

Service Station ProcedureB

eforeD

riving

157

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK (orange handle)

LOWER MARK

Page 159: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

192

207

Service Station Procedure

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

158

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

Page 160: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering andhard braking use more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

192

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

159

Page 161: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see next pagefor additional information).

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

254

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

160

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 162: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag (ifequipped) inflates, a cup holder orother hard object attached on ornear the door could be propelledinside the vehicle and hurtsomeone.

This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

161

Page 163: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk, including the back seatswhen folded down

Center pocket

Console compartment

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

162

GLOVE BOXSEAT-BACK POCKET

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

TRUNK

SEAT-BACK POCKET

Page 164: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- ×The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.

(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity inStep 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

5.

6.

3.

4.

183

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

Before

Driving

163

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 165: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers andaccessories must not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). Both are on a labelon the driver’s doorjamb.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals or the seat.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

48

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

164

Page 166: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 166.......................Starting the Engine . 167

...................Manual Transmission . 168.....Recommended Shift Points . 169

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 169

..............Automatic Transmission . 170Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 170.......................................Shifting . 170

....Sequential SportShift Mode . 172..............Engine Speed Limiter . 174

....................Shift Lock Release . 175...........................................Parking . 177

.............................Braking System . 178...............Brake System Design . 178.............Brake Wear Indicators . 178...........Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 179

Activating the Anti-lock................................Brakes . 179

........................ABS Indicator . 179Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 181.........VSA Activation Indicator . 181

..............VSA System Indicator . 181.......................VSA OFF Switch . 182

...................VSA and Tire Sizes . 182

...........................Towing a Trailer . 183

DrivingD

riving

165

Page 167: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepages to ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepages and ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see pages to

).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

16

8483

87 88

70

6353

Preparing to Drive

166

Page 168: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START (III) for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start right away,pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. Returnto step 5 if the engine does notstart.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

72

Starting the EngineD

riving

167

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

Page 169: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. When shifting upor down, make sure you push theclutch pedal down all the way, shiftto the next gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear. Downshift one gearat a time.

Manual Transmission

168

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 170: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

12 mph (19 km/h)23 mph (37 km/h)34 mph (54 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)56 mph (90 km/h)

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Manual TransmissionD

riving

169

Page 171: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators in the tachometershow which position the shift lever isin.

To shift from any position, move theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andmove the lever.

Move the lever.3

3

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Shifting

170

SHIFT LEVER

Page 172: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

- Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to Reverse. To shiftfrom Reverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromNeutral to another gear.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

175

3

3

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Reverse (R) Drive (D )

Drive (D)

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

3

Driving

171

Page 173: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftMode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D’’,move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will be in firstgear. The transmission will notautomatically upshift. Watch thetachometer and upshift manuallybefore the engine reaches redline.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

Sequential SportShift Mode

Automatic Transmission

172

Down shiftSELECTED GEAR

Up shift

Page 174: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

→→

→ --→ --→ --

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 6 mph(10 km/h)

over 20 mph(32 km/h)

over 33 mph(52 km/h)

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

The vehicle speeds drops below5 4: 33 mph (52 km/h)4 3: 20 mph (32 km/h)

If you drive uphill between5 4: 45 33 mph(72 52 km/h)4 3: 33 20 mph(52 32 km/h)3 2: 20 10 mph(32 16 km/h)

If you press the brake pedal as youdrive downhill.

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 6 mph (10 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

CONTINUED

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

173

Page 175: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 31 mph(50 km/h)

under 69 mph(110 km/h)

under 88 mph(140 km/h)

under 131 mph(210 km/h)

When you are in SequentialSportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Automatic Transmission

Starting in Second Gear Engine Speed Limiter

174

Page 176: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or finger nailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry off the edge of the cover.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.This allows you to move the shift

lever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release

Driving

175

COVER

Page 177: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Push down on the key while youmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission

176

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Page 178: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

177

Page 179: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, builds up heat,increases wear and reduces theireffectiveness. It also keeps yourbrake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System Design

178

Page 180: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

You should never pump the brake pedal;

CONTINUED

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

Driving

179

Page 181: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

250

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Important Safety Reminders

180

ABS INDICATOR

Page 182: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

CONTINUED

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator

Driving

181

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 183: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned toON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the vehicle stabilityassist system on and off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

182

236

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

182

VSA OFF SWITCH

Page 184: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everthing in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetotal trailer weight. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it tosway.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a TrailerD

riving

183

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 185: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue is:

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles is:

on the front axle

on the rear axle

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

184

4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)

2,335 Ibs (1,060 kg)

2,030 Ibs (920 kg)

Page 186: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a TrailerD

riving

185

Page 187: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localrecreational vehicle dealer for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

186

Page 188: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare aretrailer maker.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speed,and steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).183 184

227

bottom

Pre-Tow Checklist

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a TrailerD

riving

187

Page 189: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

33

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Towing a Trailer

188

Page 190: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 190.................Maintenance Schedule . 191

............Servicing Your Vehicle . 192Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 192....................Maintenance Record . 197

..............................Fluid Locations . 201........................Adding Engine Oil . 202

.......Recommended Engine Oil . 202..............................Synthetic Oil . 203

................Engine Oil Additives . 203.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 204

....................Windshield Washers . 206..............................Engine Coolant . 207

............Adding Engine Coolant . 207.......................Transmission Fluid . 209

Automatic.........................Transmission . 209

Manual.........................Transmission . 211

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 212................................Brake Fluid . 212...............................Clutch Fluid . 213

....................Power Steering Fluid . 213....................................Hood Latch . 214

.............................................Lights . 215

.......................................Seat Belts . 223.....................................Floor Mats . 223

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 223.................................Wiper Blades . 224

...............................................Tires . 226..................Inflation Guidelines . 226

...Recomended Tire Pressures . 227..........................Tire Inspection . 228

.....................Tire Maintenance . 228.............................Tire Rotation . 229

.........................Replacing Tires . 229......................Wheels and Tires . 230

..........................Winter Driving . 230.............................Snow Tires . 230............................Tire Chains . 231

...................Checking the Battery . 232.............................Vehicle Storage . 233

277

MaintenanceM

aintenance

189

Page 191: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenworking near the battery orwhen using compressed air.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

190

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 192: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Used primarily as a deliveryvehicle or taxi that is drivenmostly in stop-and-go traffic and/or parked with the engine idling.

Trailer towing, driving with aloaded roof top carrier, or drivingin mountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).152

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Which Schedule to Follow

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Maintenance

191

NOTE:

Page 193: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed at the recommended timeor mileage period to ensure long-term reliability.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.

157

158

210209

212

226

Maintenance Schedule

Servicing Your VehicleMaintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

192

Page 194: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYdrive under ‘‘severe’’ conditions, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

CONTINUED

Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the severe drivingconditions specified in the SevereConditions Maintenance Schedule onpage do not apply.195

Maintenance 193

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

Check inflation and condition once a monthCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

70112

90144

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

80128

120192

150240

100160

140224

110176

130208

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 175 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner element

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .: 192

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

Page 195: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance194

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

90144

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

((OOrr eevveerryy 66 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

120192

130208

150240

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluid

Inspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

6096

100160

110176

140224

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)

1:

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

Page 196: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

*#

Follow the Severe MaintenanceSchedule if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop and go driving, such as a taxi ora commercial delivery vehicle.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) pertrip or, in freezing temperatures,driving less than 10 miles (16 km)per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over 90°F(32°C)] conditions.

CONTINUED

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-icedroads.

Maintenance

For Canadian Owners

195

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Check inflation and condition once a monthEvery 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months,

whichever comes first

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 175 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brakesLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule

except in dusty conditions)

((OOrr eevveerryy 22 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

1 ::

223192

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

Page 197: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance196

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).1016

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

2032

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

90144

120192

130208

150240

((OOrr eevveerryy 33 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

6096

100160

110176

140224

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 yearsEvery 3 years (independent of mileage)

Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluid

Inspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

2:

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

Page 198: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

197

3,750 mi

5,000 mi

7,500 mi

10,000 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

20,000 mi

22,250 mi

25,000 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

35,000 mi

37,500 mi

40,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (pages , ) orsevere conditions (pages , ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

6,000 km

8,000 km

12,000 km

16,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

32,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

36,000 km

40,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

54,000 km

56,000 km

60,000 km

64,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

195 196193 194

Page 199: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

198

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

50,000 mi

52,500 mi

55,000 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

63,750 mi

65,000 mi

67,500 mi

70,000 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

80,000 mi

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

80,000 km

84,000 km

88,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

104,000 km

108,000 km

112,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

128,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Page 200: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

199

82,500 mi

85,000 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

95,000 mi

97,500 mi

100,000 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

110,000 mi

112,500 mi

115,000 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

132,000 km

136,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

150,000 km

152,000 km

156,000 km

166,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

176,000 km

180,000 km

184,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Page 201: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

200

123,750 mi

125,000 mi

127,500 mi

130,000 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

140,000 mi

142,500 mi

145,000 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

198,000 km

200,000 km

204,000 km

208,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

224,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

228,000 km

232,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Page 202: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

201

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

Page 203: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-30detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

202

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 204: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given in the maintenanceschedule.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-30 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-30 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Acura toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Adding Engine Oil

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Maintenance

203

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Page 205: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Remove the oil drain bolt andwasher from the bottom of theengine. Drain the oil into anappropriate container.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap.

Remove the bolt with a wrench,then remove the maintenancecover.

2.

1.3.

4.

5.

Changing the Oil and Filter

204

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

BOLT

MAINTENANCE COVER

Page 206: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Install the maintenance cover andtighten the bolt securely.

9.

8.

7.

6. 10.

12.

11.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

205

OIL FILTER

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 207: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washerlevel indicator will light when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

59

Canadian Models:

Windshield Washers

206

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 208: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

207

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 209: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

208

RADIATOR CAP

Page 210: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Check the fluid level with the engine

at normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

Maintenance

209

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Page 211: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

6.

Transmission Fluid

210

Page 212: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

To check the transmission fluid level,remove the two bolts, then pull theleft part of the under cover down.

After checking and adding the fluid,put the under cover back in placeand tighten the bolts securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Manual Transmission

Transmission FluidM

aintenance

211

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

BOLT

UNDER COVERBOLT

Page 213: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid

212

MAX MIN

Page 214: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

CONTINUED

Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering FluidM

aintenance

213

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Page 215: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your dealer.

Hood Latch

Power Steering Fluid, Hood Latch

214

LATCH ASSEMBLY

PIVOTS

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Page 216: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be performed by your dealeror other qualified mechanic.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Your vehicle has two bulbs on eachside, four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your vehicle uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming

Low Beam Headlight BulbReplacement

Replacing a High Beam HeadlightBulb

LightsM

aintenance

215

NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.

Page 217: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the driver’s side, undo thethree fasteners and remove the airintake cover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber weather sealover the back of the headlightassembly. Make sure it is rightside up; it is marked with an arrow.1. 2.

3.

6.

4.

5.

Lights

216

FASTENER

AIR INTAKE COVER HOLD-DOWN WIRE

BULB

CONNECTOR

RUBBER WEATHER SEAL

Page 218: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Open the hood.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

On the driver’s side, reinstall theair intake cover. Reinstall thethree fasteners and secure themby pushing on the heads until theylock.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal Light Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

217

SOCKET

Page 219: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, and turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4.

5.2.

1.

3.

Replacing a Front Parking LightBulb

Lights

218

HOLDING CLIPS

Page 220: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise,and pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the new bulb to make sure itworks.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.

1.

3.

2.

6.

7.

8.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Maintenance

219

COVER

Page 221: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Open the trunk.

To replace a bulb on the left side,remove the two trim clips. On theright side, remove a trim clip.

Pull the lining back carefully.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

1.

2.

5.

6.

4.

3.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

220

TRIM CLIPS SOCKETS

BULBS

Page 222: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk lid seal.

Press the trim clips back into theirholes.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

7.

8.

9.

10.

1.

2.

3.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

221

Page 223: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your Acura dealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your Acura dealer.

Lights

Side Turn Signal Light Rear License Plate Bulb

222

Page 224: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use aftermarket floor matsmake sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Clean dirty seat belts with a softbrush and a mixture of mild soap andwarm water. Do not use bleach, dye,or cleaning solvents that can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the vehicle.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormats from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.

Have your Acura dealer replace thisfilter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)under normal conditions. It shouldbe replaced every 15,000 miles(24,000 km) if you drive primarily inurban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air, or ifthe airflow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.

Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Seat Belts Floor Mats

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

223

LOOP

Page 225: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

224

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Page 226: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield. Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

225

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Page 227: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced. Check the air pressures when the

tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressures on the next page.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose one to two psi (10to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

226

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 228: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .264

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront:

Rear:

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Maintenance

227

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P215/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

Page 229: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Tires

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

228

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Acura wheels weights f orbalancing.

Page 230: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires at these intervals:

CONTINUED

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

TiresM

aintenance

229

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Page 231: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

Wheel:If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer. Tire:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

265

267

Tires

Snow Tires

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

230

17 x 7 JJ

P215/50R17 93V

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 232: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Acura stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

CH2412T

Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

231

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Page 233: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

232

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Page 234: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

CONTINUED

Vehicle Storage

Checking the Battery, Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

233

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 235: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(6-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

193

Vehicle Storage

234

Page 236: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 236....................Changing a Flat Tire . 237

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 241Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 241The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 242

................................Jump Starting . 243............If Your Engine Overheats . 245

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 247..........Charging System Indicator . 248

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 248.......................Readiness Codes . 249

...............Brake System Indicator . 250..................Closing the Moonroof . 251

......................Emergency Towing . 252..............................................Fuses . 254

..........Checking and Replacing . 254

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

235

Page 237: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

182

Compact Spare Tire

236

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 238: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or Reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

237

TRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOL TRAY TOOLS

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 239: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of the trunk.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool tray out of the trunk,and remove the tools and the jack.

7.3.

4.

5.

6.

Changing a Flat Tire

238

JACKING POINTTOOL TRAY

Page 240: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surface ofthe wheel facing up.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

8.

9.

10.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

239

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

Page 241: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the tooltray, and place the tool tray backin the trunk.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Changing a Flat Tire

240

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

Fornormaltire

Forsparetire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 242: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or do not come on atall, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Check these things:

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

19.

243

CONTINUED

If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

241

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Page 243: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery connections (see page

). You can then try jumpstarting the vehicle from a boosterbattery (see page ).

252

243

232

167

72

254

252

If the Engine Won’t Start

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

242

Page 244: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

The numbers in the illustration showthe order to connect the jumpercable.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

1.

2.3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

243

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 245: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

7.

6.

5.

4.

Jump Starting

244

Page 246: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

252

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

245

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Page 247: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

7.

6. 8.

9.

10.

11.

252Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

246

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 248: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action. If necessary, add oil to bring the

level back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

252

157

202

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

247

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

Page 249: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, it means one of the engine’semission control systems may have aproblem. Even though you may feelno difference in your vehicle’sperformance, continued operationmay cause serious damage.

Malfunction Indicator LampCharging System Indicator

Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp

248

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

Page 250: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer tofor more information (see page ).271

Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator LampTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

249

If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Page 251: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

* However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, the brake fluid level isprobably low in the reservoir. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

). If the fluid level is low, takethe vehicle to your dealer and havethe brake system inspected for leaksor worn brake pads.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your Acura dealerimmediately.

252

212

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator

250

U.S. indicator shown

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 252: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

5.

6.

4.3.

1.

2.

258

Closing the MoonroofTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

251

SOCKETROUND PLUG

Page 253: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service oran organization. Never tow yourvehicle with just a rope or chain. It isvery dangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Manual Transmission

Automatic Transmission:

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency Towing

252

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

Page 254: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in Accessory (I) sothe steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

253

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

Page 255: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

257 258

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

254

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

NOTCH TAB

Page 256: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

3. 4.

5.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

255

BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN

Page 257: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

6.

Fuses

256

FUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 258: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

+No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

12345

15 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A

Left Headlight Low(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight Hi

6789

10

15 A7.5 A15 A20 A

Right Headlight LowBack UpFI ECUCondenser fanNot Used

111213141516171819202122

23

20 A

20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

Cooling FanNot UsedHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardVSA MotorVSAOP 1OP 2Heater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

257

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

Page 259: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

: On Canadian models

123456

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)10 A20 A10 A

DBWIgnition CoilDay LightLAFAudio AmpInterior Light

789

101112

10 A20 A15 A7.5 A30 A

Back-Up LightsDoor LockFront Accessory SocketsOPDSWiperNot Used

131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

20 A20 A

(20 A)20 A20 A15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A

7.5 A(7.5 A)

AS P/SEAT (REC)Driver’s Power Seat SlidingHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat RecliningAS P/SEAT (SLIDE)ACGFuel PumpWasherMeterSRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedA/CNot UsedACCOPTION

Fuses

258

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Page 260: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 260................................Specifications . 262

DOT Tire Quality Grading.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 265

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 265.................................Treadwear . 265

......................................Traction . 265.............................Temperature . 266

.................................Tire Labeling . 267.......................Emissions Controls . 268.....................The Clean Air Act . 268

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 268

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 268

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 268

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 269....................PGM-FI System . 269

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 269

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 269

....................Replacement Parts . 269..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 270

..............State Emissions Testing . 271

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

259

Page 261: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

260

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 262: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

261

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

Page 263: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

Specifications

262

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Capacities

1.43 US gal (5.4 )1.40 US gal (5.3 )

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)

105.1 in (2,670 mm)59.6 in (1,515 mm)59.6 in (1,515 mm)

183.3 in (4,657 mm)69.4 in (1,762 mm)57.3 in (1,456 mm)

ND-OIL8

1.96 US gal (7.4 )1.93 US gal (7.3 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )2.1 US qt (2.0 )2.3 US qt (2.2 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

Page 264: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

----------------

CONTINUED

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

263

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

12 V 21 W

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

21 W21/5 W5 W21 W21 W

12 V 55 W12 V 35 W

12 V 3 CP3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

144 cu-in (2,354 cm )10.5 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°13’

12 V 38 AH/5 HR

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

1.1 W2 CP5 W8 W8 W3 CP

12 V 3 CP

SKJ20DR-M11

Headlights

Front turn signalFront parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsRear side marker lightLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightVanity mirror lights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, gasoline engine

IZFR6K-11

See page 258 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 257 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

NGK:DENSO:

Page 265: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Specifications

264

Tires

P215/50R17 93VT135/80D16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Front/RearSpareFrontRearSpare

Page 266: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)TechnicalInform

ation

265

Page 267: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

266

Page 268: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Max Press

Max Load

94

225

55

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire LabelingTechnicalInform

ation

267

P225/55R16 94V

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

Page 269: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

268

Page 270: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

269

Page 271: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

270

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 272: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

TechnicalInform

ation

271

Page 273: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing

272

Page 274: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

....Customer Service Information . 274....................Warranty Coverages . 275

Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 276

.....................Authorized Manuals . 277

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

273

Page 275: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Service Office.

260

Customer Service Information

274

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

(787) 250-4327

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Page 276: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty manual for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Please refer to the 2005 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.this warranty gives up

to 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2005 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

275

Page 277: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

276

Page 278: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

*2005

ACU

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

CONTINUED

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

277

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2004-2005 Acura TSX Service Manual

2004-2005 Acura TSX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004-2005 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual

2005 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual

2005 Acura TSX Navigation

System Owner’s Manual

2005 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal

2005 Acura TSX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$10.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61SEA01

61SEA01EL

61SEA30

31SEA610

31SEA710

31SEA910

31SEAQ10

ACU-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 279: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

278

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 280: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 160ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 73...............Accessory Power Socket . 97

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 202...................................Airbag (SRS) . 11

..........Airbag System Components . 23............................Air Conditioning . 103

.........................................Usage . 105.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 227

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 55, 179

...................................Operation . 179.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 73

........Audio System . 112, 120, 128, 133.............Automatic Speed Control . 143..............Automatic Transmission . 170

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 262....Sequential SportShift Mode . 172

.......................................Shifting . 170.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 170

................Shift Lever Positions . 170....................Shift Lock Release . 175

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 54, 248............................Jump Starting . 243

..............................Maintenance . 232............................Specifications . 263

..............................Before Driving . 151........................................Belts, Seat . 10

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 179

.............Break-in, New Linings . 152....................Bulb Replacement . 219

...........................................Fluid . 212.........................................Parking . 93

.........................System Indicator . 54........................Wear Indicators . 178

.............................Braking System . 178........................Break-in, New Car . 152

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 68........................Brights, Headlights . 66

Bulb Replacement..............................Brake Lights . 219

................Front Parking Lights . 217.................................Headlights . 215

.........High-mount Brake Light . 221............................Specifications . 263

............Turn Signal Lights . 217, 219..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 215

............................Capacities Chart . 262.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 48

.............................Carrying Cargo . 162..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...................................CD Changer . 122.......................................CD Player . 120

..........................CD Pocket, Center . 96

........................Certification Label . 260............................................Chains . 231

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 237Changing Oil

........................................How to . 204.............................When to . 193, 195

...Charging System Indicator . 54, 248............Checklist, Before Driving . 166

..................Childproof Door Locks . 76

Index

A B

C

IND

EX

I

Page 281: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

.......................................Child Seats . 30...........Lower Anchorage Points . 39..........Tether Anchorage Points . 43

..............Climate Control Sensors . 111.........................Clock, Setting the . 141

...................................Clutch Fluid . 213............Cold Weather, Starting in . 167

..............................Compact Spare . 236...................Console Compartment . 97.................Consumer Information . 274

Coolant........................................Adding . 207

....................................Checking . 158.........................Proper Solution . 207

...................Temperature Gauge . 61Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 268............Cruise Control Operation . 143.............Customer Service Office . 277

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 52

................Daytime Running Lights . 68............Defects, Reporting Safety . 276

................Defogger, Rear Window . 69....................................Dimensions . 262

...............Dimming the Headlights . 66Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 209..................................Engine Oil . 157

..........................Directional Signals . 66........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 178

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 205Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 74..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 265

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 168

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 165

....................................Economy . 159..........Dual Temperature Control . 109

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 223

..............................Economy, Fuel . 159............Emergencies on the Road . 235.............Battery, Jump Starting . 243...........Brake System Indicator . 250

................Changing a Flat Tire . 237.....Charging System Indicator . 248

..................Checking the Fuses . 254.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 247...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 248...Manually Closing Moonroof . 251

..................Overheated Engine . 245...........................Emergency Brake . 93

......................Emergency Flashers . 69......................Emergency Towing . 252.......................Emissions Controls . 268

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 61

Malfunction Indicator......................................Lamp . 248

..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 247

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 202...............................Overheating . 245

............................Specifications . 262

....................Speed Limiter . 169, 174.......................................Starting . 167

..........Engine Speed Limiter . 169, 174.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 268

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 48Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

Index

D E

II

Page 282: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 102...........................................Features . 99

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 154Filter

.........................Dust and Pollen . 223...............................................Oil . 204

Manual Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 211

Manual Transmission................................Shifting the . 168

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 69...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 237

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 209

..........................................Brake . 212.........................................Clutch . 213

..............Manual Transmission . 211..........................Power Steering . 213

..................Windshield Washer . 206...........................Folding Rear Seat . 85..........................Four-way Flashers . 69

.................................................Fuel . 152...............................Cap Message . 62

......................Fill Door and Cap . 154

...........................................Gauge . 62................Octane Requirement . 152

........................Tank, Filling the . 154.....................Fuses, Checking the . 254

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 159.........................................Gasoline . 152...........................................Gauge . 62

................Octane Requirement . 152........................Tank, Filling the . 154

................Gas Station Procedures . 154Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 61...............................................Fuel . 62

...............................Speedometer . 60.................................Tachometer . 60

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 170

..............Manual Transmission . 168....................................Glove Box . 98

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 215

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 69........................................Headlights . 66

........................................Aiming . 215..............Automatic Lighting Off . 67............Daytime Running Lights . 68............Low Beams, Turning on . 66

.........................Reminder Chime . 66........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 215

...................................Turning on . 66..............................Head Restraints . 84

.....................Heating and Cooling . 100.................................Heated Mirror . 88

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 146

..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 155...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 213

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 260Ignition

..............................................Keys . 71...........................................Switch . 73

............Timing Control System . 269

Index

F

G

H

I

IND

EX

III

Page 283: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

........................Immobilizer System . 72.........Important Safety Precautions . 8

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 54...............................Infant Restraint . 35

......................................Infant Seats . 35..........Tether Anchorage Points . 43

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 226...................................Inside Mirror . 87

.............................Inspection, Tire . 228....................Installing a Child Seat . 39

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 43.............................Using LATCH . 39............................Instrument Panel . 53

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 68........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 238.......................................Jack, Tire . 237

................................Jump Starting . 243

..................................................Keys . 71

..................................Maintenance . 189...Owner Maintenance Checks . 192

........................................Record . 197......................Required Indicator . 62

..........................................Safety . 190.............................Schedule . 193-196

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 248...................Manual Transmission . 168

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 211...............................Meters, Gauges . 60

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 88.................................Modifications . 161

.........................................Moonroof . 92......................Closing Manually . 251

.....................................Operation . 92

...................Neutral Gear Position . 171..................New Vehicle Break-in . 152

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 169...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 260

.......................Label, Certification . 260.................Lane Change, Signaling . 66

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 215.......................................Indicator . 53

.......................................Parking . 218..................Turn Signal . 57, 217, 219

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 73Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 73............................Fuel Fill Door . 154

....................................Glove Box . 98....................Lockout Prevention . 75

.................................Power Door . 75...........................................Trunk . 81

........................Low Coolant Level . 158...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 169

...........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 54...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 262

.........................................Luggage . 162

Index

J

K

L M

N

IV

Page 284: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 152.........................................Odometer . 60

Oil........................Change, How to . 204...............Change, When to . 193-196......................Checking Engine . 157..............Pressure Indicator . 54, 247

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 203

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 73..............................Outside Mirrors . 88

.....................Outside Temperature . 60....................Overheating, Engine . 245

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 192

..............Panel Brightness Control . 68........................Park Gear Position . 171

.................................Parking Brake . 93

.................................Parking Lights . 66..Parking Over Things that Burn . 270

..................................Parking Tips . 177.............................PGM-FI System . 269

...................................Pollen Filter . 223.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 30Protecting Infants and Small

.......................................Children . 35...........Protecting Larger Children . 44

.....................Using Booster Seat . 45

...................Radiator Overheating . 245Radio/CD Sound

...............System . 112, 120, 128, 133Rear Lights,

.............Bulb Replacement . 219-220..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 85

............................Rear View Mirror . 91.................Rear Window Defogger . 69...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 83

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 169.............................Reminder Lights . 54

.......................Remote Transmitter . 76

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 204

..........................................Fuses . 254................................Light Bulbs . 215

.............................Schedule . 193-196...........................................Tires . 229

.............................Wiper Blades . 224Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 21.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 207

...............................Restraint, Child . 30..................Reverse Gear Position . 171

................................Rotation, Tire . 229

......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 276

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 49

...............................Safety Messages . ii................................Satellite Radio . 133

Index

O

P

R

S

IND

EX

V

Page 285: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

.........................................Seat Belts . 10...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20................................Maintenance . 21

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 20, 54

...................System Components . 20...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20........................Seats, Adjusting the . 83

............................Security System . 142.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 37

...................Select/Reset Knob . 63, 68...............................Serial Number . 260

....................Service Intervals . 193-196.............................Service Manual . 277

...........Service Station Procedure . 154..........................Setting the Clock . 141

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 172.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 170

........................Shift Lock Release . 175..............................Side Airbags . 11, 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 28................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 27

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 27

...............................Signaling Turns . 66.....................................Snow Tires . 230

.......Sound System . 112, 120, 128, 133Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 236............................Specifications . 264

....................Specifications Charts . 262................................Speed Control . 143........................Speed Limiter . 169, 174...................................Speedometer . 60

..........SRS, Additional Information . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 29

.............................Airbag Service . 28How Your SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 27How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 24How Your Side Airbags

.........................................Work . 26........................SRS Components . 20

.............................SRS Indicator . 27, 55

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 73.......................Starting the Engine . 167

................With a Dead Battery . 243........Steam Coming from Engine . 245

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 70

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 73Stereo Sound

...............System . 112, 120, 128, 133..........................................Sun Visor . 94

..........................Sunglasses Holder . 98Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 11, 23

......................................Servicing . 28.........................SRS Indicator . 27, 55

...................System Components . 23..................................Synthetic Oil . 203

.....................................Tachometer . 60......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 219

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 235Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 265.....Emissions Control Systems . 268

Index

T

VI

Page 286: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 235

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 265........................Unleaded Gasoline . 152

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 223.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 205

..................................Vanity Mirror . 94.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 163

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 262....Vehicle Identification Number . 260

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 181

.........VSA Activation Indicator . 181.........................VSA Off Switch . 182

..............VSA System Indicator . 181.............................Vehicle Storage . 233

.................................................VIN . 260..................................Viscosity, Oil . 203

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 270

.......................Temperature Gauge . 61..............Tether Anchorage Points . 43

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 270..........................Time, Setting the . 141

....................................Tire Chains . 231.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 237

.................................Tire Labeling . 267...............................................Tires . 226

..............................Air Pressure . 227.........................Checking Wear . 228..........................Compact Spare . 236

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 265......................................Inflation . 226

..................................Inspection . 228...................................Replacing . 229

......................................Rotating . 229...........................................Snow . 230

............................Specifications . 264...................Tools, Tire Changing . 237

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 183

................Emergency Wrecker . 252

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 209Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 211..........Fluid Selection . 210, 211, 212

..............Identification Number . 260.............Shifting the Automatic . 170

..................Shifting the Manual . 168.....................................Treadwear . 265.......................................Trip Meter . 61

................................................Trunk . 80....................Emergency Opener . 81

.................................Main Switch . 81

.................................Opening the . 80...................Open Monitor Light . 56

....................................Turn Signals . 66.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 49

....................Warranty Coverages . 275Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 206.....................................Operation . 65

Index

U

V

W

IND

EX

VII

Page 287: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 70............Alignment and Balance . 228

..........................Compact Spare . 236......................................Wrench . 237

Windows..................Operating the Power . 89

...........................Rear, Defogger . 69Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 65

.......................................Washers . 65Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 224.....................................Operation . 65

....................................Worn Tires . 228.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 252

Index

VIII

Page 288: 2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BTS0505OM/enu/TS...2005 TSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

6-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

2.1 US qt (2.0 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Premium grade 5W-30detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front:

Rear:

202

210

211

213

212